Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 26490:2b08d829af86
Fix complaints from makeinfo 4.0.
author | Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Thu, 18 Nov 1999 16:00:03 +0000 |
parents | e3a9ceb7a557 |
children | 10af169a628b |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
42 #include "commands.h" | |
43 #include "disptab.h" | |
44 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
94 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
95 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
96 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
97 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
98 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 99 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
100 #endif | |
25012 | 101 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
102 | |
103 | |
104 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
105 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
106 | |
107 struct dim | |
108 { | |
109 int width; | |
110 int height; | |
111 }; | |
112 | |
113 | |
114 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
115 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
116 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
117 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 118 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
119 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
120 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
121 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
122 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
123 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
124 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
125 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
126 struct dim)); | |
127 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
128 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
129 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
130 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
131 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
132 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
133 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 134 static void swap_glyphs_in_rows P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
135 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
136 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
137 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
138 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
139 struct window *)); | |
140 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
141 struct window *)); | |
142 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
143 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
144 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
145 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
146 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
147 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
148 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
149 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
150 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
151 int, int)); | |
152 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
153 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
154 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
155 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 156 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
157 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 158 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
159 int)); | |
160 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
161 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
162 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 163 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
164 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
165 #endif |
25012 | 166 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
167 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
168 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
169 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
170 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
171 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
172 struct glyph_row *)); | |
173 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
174 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
175 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
176 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
177 | |
178 | |
179 | |
180 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
181 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
182 scrolling. */ | |
183 | |
184 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
185 |
554 | 186 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 187 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 188 |
764 | 189 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 190 |
25012 | 191 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 192 |
193 int display_completed; | |
194 | |
25012 | 195 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
196 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 197 |
198 int visible_bell; | |
199 | |
764 | 200 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 201 |
202 int inverse_video; | |
203 | |
204 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
205 | |
206 int baud_rate; | |
207 | |
25012 | 208 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
209 is running. */ | |
314 | 210 |
211 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
212 | |
213 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 214 |
314 | 215 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
216 | |
25012 | 217 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
218 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 219 |
220 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 221 as a character code. |
222 | |
223 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
224 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 225 |
226 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
227 | |
228 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
229 | |
230 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
231 | |
25012 | 232 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
233 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
234 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
235 | |
314 | 236 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
237 |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
238 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
25012 | 239 |
314 | 240 |
25012 | 241 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
242 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
243 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
244 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 245 |
246 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 247 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 248 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
249 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 250 |
251 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
252 | |
253 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
254 | |
255 FILE *termscript; | |
256 | |
257 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
258 | |
259 struct cm Wcm; | |
260 | |
261 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
262 | |
263 int delayed_size_change; | |
264 | |
265 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
266 | |
267 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
268 | |
269 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
270 | |
271 struct window *updated_window; | |
272 | |
273 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
274 | |
275 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
276 int updated_area; | |
277 | |
278 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
279 | |
280 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
281 | |
282 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
283 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
284 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
285 | |
286 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
287 | |
288 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
289 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
290 | |
291 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
292 int glyph_pool_count; | |
293 | |
294 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
295 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
296 | |
297 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
298 | |
299 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
300 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
301 | |
302 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
303 | |
304 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
305 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
306 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
307 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
308 loaded on demand. */ | |
309 | |
310 int fonts_changed_p; | |
311 | |
312 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
313 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
314 | |
315 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
316 | |
317 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
318 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
319 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
320 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
321 | |
322 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
323 | |
324 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
325 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
326 | |
327 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
328 | |
329 | |
330 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
331 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
332 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 333 |
334 void | |
335 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
336 char *from, *to; | |
337 int size; | |
338 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
339 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 340 return; |
341 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
342 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
343 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
344 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
345 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
346 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
347 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 else |
314 | 350 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
351 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 353 |
354 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
355 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
356 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
357 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
358 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
359 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 360 if (to - from < 64) |
361 { | |
362 do | |
363 *--endt = *--endf; | |
364 while (endf != from); | |
365 } | |
366 else | |
367 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
368 for (;;) |
314 | 369 { |
370 endt -= (to - from); | |
371 endf -= (to - from); | |
372 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
373 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
374 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
375 |
314 | 376 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
377 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
378 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
379 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 380 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
381 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 382 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
383 } | |
384 } | |
385 } | |
386 | |
25012 | 387 |
388 | |
389 /*********************************************************************** | |
390 Glyph Matrices | |
391 ***********************************************************************/ | |
392 | |
393 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
394 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
395 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
396 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
397 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
398 | |
399 struct glyph_matrix * | |
400 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
401 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
402 { | |
403 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
404 | |
405 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
406 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
407 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
408 | |
409 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
410 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
411 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
412 | |
413 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
414 result->pool = pool; | |
415 return result; | |
416 } | |
417 | |
418 | |
419 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
420 | |
421 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
422 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
423 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
424 pointer was passed to this function. | |
425 | |
426 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
427 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
428 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
429 | |
430 static void | |
431 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
432 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
433 { | |
434 if (matrix) | |
435 { | |
436 int i; | |
437 | |
438 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
439 allocated. */ | |
440 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
441 abort (); | |
442 | |
443 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
444 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
445 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
446 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
447 | |
448 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
449 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
450 xfree (matrix); | |
451 } | |
452 } | |
453 | |
454 | |
455 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
456 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
457 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
458 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
459 or a float. */ | |
460 | |
461 static int | |
462 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
463 struct window *w; | |
464 int total_glyphs; | |
465 Lisp_Object margin; | |
466 { | |
467 int n; | |
468 | |
469 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
470 { | |
471 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
472 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
473 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
474 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
475 } | |
476 else | |
477 n = 0; | |
478 | |
479 return n; | |
480 } | |
481 | |
482 | |
483 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
484 window sizes. | |
485 | |
486 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
487 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
488 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
489 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
490 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
491 | |
492 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
493 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
494 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
495 MATRIX->pool. | |
496 | |
497 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
498 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
499 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
500 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
501 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
502 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
503 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
504 | |
505 static void | |
506 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
507 struct window *w; | |
508 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
509 int x, y; | |
510 struct dim dim; | |
511 { | |
512 int i; | |
513 int new_rows; | |
514 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 515 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
516 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 517 int left = -1, right = -1; |
518 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
519 | |
520 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
521 if (w) | |
522 { | |
25546 | 523 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
524 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 525 } |
25546 | 526 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 527 |
528 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
529 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
530 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
531 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
532 { | |
533 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
534 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
535 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
536 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
537 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
538 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
539 | |
540 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
541 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 542 && !header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 543 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
544 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
545 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
546 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
547 return; | |
548 } | |
549 | |
550 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
551 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
552 { | |
553 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
554 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
555 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
556 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
557 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
558 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
559 } | |
560 else | |
561 new_rows = 0; | |
562 | |
563 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
564 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
565 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
566 if (matrix->pool) | |
567 { | |
568 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
569 | |
570 if (w) | |
571 { | |
572 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
573 w->left_margin_width); | |
574 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
575 w->right_margin_width); | |
576 } | |
577 else | |
578 left = right = 0; | |
579 | |
580 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
581 { | |
582 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
583 | |
584 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
585 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
586 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
587 + x); | |
588 | |
589 if (w == NULL | |
590 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 591 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 592 { |
593 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
594 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
595 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
596 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
597 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
598 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
599 } | |
600 else | |
601 { | |
602 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
603 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
604 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
605 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
606 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
607 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
608 } | |
609 } | |
610 | |
611 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
612 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
613 } | |
614 else | |
615 { | |
616 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
617 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
618 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
619 || new_rows | |
25546 | 620 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 621 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
622 { | |
623 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
624 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
625 | |
626 while (row < end) | |
627 { | |
628 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
629 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
630 (dim.width | |
631 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
632 | |
633 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
634 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 635 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 636 { |
637 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
638 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
639 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
640 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
641 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
642 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
643 } | |
644 else | |
645 { | |
646 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
647 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
648 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
649 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
650 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
651 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
652 } | |
653 ++row; | |
654 } | |
655 } | |
656 | |
657 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
658 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
659 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
660 } | |
661 | |
662 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
663 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
664 | |
665 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
666 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
667 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
668 when this function runs. */ | |
669 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
670 { | |
671 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
672 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
673 of the window. */ | |
674 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
675 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
676 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
677 { | |
678 i = 0; | |
679 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
680 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
681 < matrix->window_height)) | |
682 ++i; | |
683 | |
684 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
685 are invalidated. */ | |
686 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
687 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
688 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
689 | |
690 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
691 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
692 } | |
693 else | |
694 { | |
695 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
696 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
697 } | |
698 } | |
699 | |
700 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
701 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
702 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
703 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
704 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
705 | |
706 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
707 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
708 if (w) | |
709 { | |
710 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
711 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
712 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
713 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
714 } | |
715 } | |
716 | |
717 | |
718 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
719 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
720 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
721 below). */ | |
314 | 722 |
723 static void | |
25012 | 724 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
725 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
726 int start, end; | |
314 | 727 { |
25012 | 728 int i, j; |
729 | |
730 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
731 { | |
732 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
733 initialization. */ | |
734 struct glyph_row temp; | |
735 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
736 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
737 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
738 } | |
314 | 739 } |
740 | |
25012 | 741 |
742 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
743 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
744 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
745 row structures are moved around). | |
746 | |
747 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
748 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
749 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
750 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
751 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
752 rotating right. */ | |
753 | |
754 void | |
755 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
756 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
757 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 758 { |
25012 | 759 if (by < 0) |
760 { | |
761 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
762 by = -by; | |
763 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
764 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
765 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
766 } | |
767 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 768 { |
25012 | 769 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
770 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
771 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
772 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 773 } |
25012 | 774 } |
775 | |
776 | |
777 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
778 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
779 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
780 | |
781 void | |
782 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, | |
783 delta_bytes) | |
784 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
785 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
786 { | |
787 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
788 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
789 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
790 xassert (start <= end); | |
791 | |
792 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
793 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (matrix->rows + start, | |
794 delta, delta_bytes); | |
795 } | |
796 | |
797 | |
798 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
799 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
800 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
801 | |
802 void | |
803 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
804 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
805 int start, end; | |
806 int enabled_p; | |
807 { | |
808 xassert (start <= end); | |
809 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
810 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
811 | |
812 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
813 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
814 } | |
815 | |
816 | |
817 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
818 | |
819 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
820 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
821 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
822 enabled_p flag. | |
823 | |
824 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
825 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
826 | |
827 void | |
828 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
829 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
830 { | |
831 if (matrix) | |
314 | 832 { |
25012 | 833 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
834 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 835 } |
836 } | |
25012 | 837 |
838 | |
839 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
840 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
841 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
842 | |
843 void | |
844 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
845 struct window *w; | |
846 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
847 int start, end, dy; | |
848 { | |
849 int min_y, max_y; | |
850 | |
851 xassert (start <= end); | |
852 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
853 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
854 | |
25546 | 855 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 856 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
857 | |
858 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
859 { | |
860 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
861 | |
862 row->y += dy; | |
863 | |
864 if (row->y < min_y) | |
865 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
866 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
867 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
868 else | |
869 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
870 } | |
871 } | |
872 | |
873 | |
874 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
875 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
876 current matrix. */ | |
877 | |
878 void | |
879 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
880 register struct frame *f; | |
881 { | |
882 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
883 if (f->current_matrix) | |
884 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
885 | |
886 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
887 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
888 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
889 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
890 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
891 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
892 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
893 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
894 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 895 |
896 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
897 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
898 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
899 } | |
900 | |
901 | |
902 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 903 |
21514 | 904 void |
25012 | 905 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
906 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 907 { |
25012 | 908 if (f->desired_matrix) |
909 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
910 | |
911 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
912 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
913 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
914 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
915 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 916 |
917 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
918 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
919 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
920 } | |
921 | |
922 | |
923 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
924 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
925 | |
926 static void | |
927 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
928 struct window *w; | |
929 int desired_p; | |
930 { | |
931 while (w) | |
314 | 932 { |
25012 | 933 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
934 { | |
935 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
936 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
937 } | |
938 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 939 { |
25012 | 940 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
941 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
942 } | |
943 else | |
944 { | |
945 if (desired_p) | |
946 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
947 else | |
314 | 948 { |
25012 | 949 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
950 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 951 } |
25012 | 952 } |
953 | |
954 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
955 } | |
956 } | |
957 | |
958 | |
959 | |
960 /*********************************************************************** | |
961 Glyph Rows | |
962 | |
963 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
964 ***********************************************************************/ | |
965 | |
966 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
967 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
968 structure members. */ | |
969 | |
970 void | |
971 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
972 struct glyph_row *row; | |
973 { | |
974 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
975 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
976 | |
977 /* Save pointers. */ | |
978 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
979 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
980 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
981 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
982 | |
983 /* Clear. */ | |
984 *row = null_row; | |
985 | |
986 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
987 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
988 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
989 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
990 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
991 } | |
992 | |
993 | |
994 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
995 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
996 | |
997 void | |
998 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
999 struct window *w; | |
1000 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1001 int y; | |
1002 { | |
1003 int min_y, max_y; | |
1004 | |
25546 | 1005 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1006 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1007 | |
1008 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1009 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1010 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1011 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1012 |
1013 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1014 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1015 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1016 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1017 else | |
1018 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1019 | |
1020 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1021 } | |
1022 | |
1023 | |
1024 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1025 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1026 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1027 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1028 ends. */ | |
1029 | |
1030 void | |
1031 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1032 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1033 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1034 { | |
1035 int area, i; | |
1036 | |
1037 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1038 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1039 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1040 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1041 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1042 | |
1043 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1044 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1045 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1046 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1047 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1048 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1049 | |
1050 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1051 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1052 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1053 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1054 } | |
1055 | |
1056 | |
1057 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph | |
1058 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1059 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1060 | |
1061 static void | |
1062 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1063 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1064 { | |
1065 int area; | |
1066 | |
1067 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1068 { | |
1069 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1070 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1071 | |
1072 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1073 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1074 | |
1075 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1076 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1077 | |
1078 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1079 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1080 | |
1081 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1082 { | |
1083 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1084 initialization. */ | |
1085 struct glyph temp; | |
1086 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1087 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1088 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1089 ++glyph_a; | |
1090 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1091 } |
1092 } | |
1093 } | |
25012 | 1094 |
1095 | |
1096 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1097 | |
1098 static INLINE void | |
1099 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1100 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1101 { | |
1102 int i; | |
1103 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1104 { | |
1105 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1106 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1107 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1108 } | |
1109 } | |
1110 | |
1111 | |
1112 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1113 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1114 | |
1115 INLINE void | |
1116 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1117 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1118 { | |
1119 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1120 | |
1121 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1122 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1123 | |
1124 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1125 *to = *from; | |
1126 | |
1127 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1128 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1129 } | |
1130 | |
1131 | |
1132 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1133 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1134 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1135 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1136 | |
1137 void | |
1138 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1139 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1140 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1141 { | |
1142 int area; | |
1143 | |
1144 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1145 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1146 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1147 | |
1148 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1149 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1150 if (from->used[area]) | |
1151 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1152 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1153 | |
1154 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
1155 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); | |
1156 } | |
1157 | |
1158 | |
1159 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1160 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1161 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1162 a memory leak. */ | |
1163 | |
1164 static INLINE void | |
1165 assign_row (to, from) | |
1166 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1167 { | |
1168 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1169 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1170 } | |
1171 | |
1172 | |
1173 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1174 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1175 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1176 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1177 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1178 | |
1179 static int | |
1180 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1181 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1182 { | |
1183 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1184 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1185 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1186 | |
1187 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1188 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1189 } | |
1190 | |
1191 | |
1192 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice | |
1193 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1194 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1195 | |
1196 static struct glyph_row * | |
1197 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1198 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1199 int row; | |
1200 { | |
1201 int i; | |
1202 | |
1203 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1204 | |
1205 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1206 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1207 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1208 break; | |
1209 | |
1210 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1211 } | |
1212 | |
1213 | |
1214 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1215 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1216 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1217 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1218 | |
1219 void | |
1220 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1221 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1222 { | |
1223 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1224 { | |
1225 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1226 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1227 } | |
1228 } | |
1229 | |
1230 | |
1231 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1232 | |
1233 int | |
1234 line_hash_code (row) | |
1235 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1236 { | |
1237 int hash = 0; | |
1238 | |
1239 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1240 { | |
1241 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1242 { | |
1243 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1244 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1245 hash = -1; | |
1246 } | |
1247 else | |
1248 { | |
1249 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1250 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1251 | |
1252 while (glyph < end) | |
1253 { | |
1254 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*glyph); | |
1255 if (must_write_spaces) | |
1256 g -= SPACEGLYPH; | |
1257 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + g; | |
1258 ++glyph; | |
1259 } | |
1260 | |
1261 if (hash == 0) | |
1262 hash = 1; | |
1263 } | |
1264 } | |
1265 | |
1266 return hash; | |
1267 } | |
1268 | |
1269 | |
1270 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1271 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1272 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1273 | |
1274 static unsigned int | |
1275 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1276 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1277 int vpos; | |
1278 { | |
1279 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1280 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1281 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1282 int len; | |
1283 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1284 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1285 | |
1286 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1287 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1288 { | |
1289 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1290 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1291 --end; | |
1292 | |
1293 /* All blank line. */ | |
1294 if (end == beg) | |
1295 return 0; | |
1296 | |
1297 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1298 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1299 ++beg; | |
1300 } | |
1301 | |
1302 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1303 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1304 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1305 len = end - beg; | |
1306 else | |
1307 { | |
1308 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1309 in LEN. */ | |
1310 len = 0; | |
1311 while (beg < end) | |
1312 { | |
1313 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1314 | |
1315 if (GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) | |
1316 len += 1; | |
1317 else | |
1318 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1319 | |
1320 ++beg; | |
1321 } | |
1322 } | |
1323 | |
1324 return len; | |
1325 } | |
1326 | |
1327 | |
1328 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1329 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1330 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
1331 visibility. */ | |
1332 | |
1333 static INLINE int | |
1334 row_equal_p (w, a, b) | |
1335 struct window *w; | |
1336 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1337 { | |
1338 if (a == b) | |
1339 return 1; | |
1340 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1341 return 0; | |
1342 else | |
1343 { | |
1344 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1345 int area; | |
1346 | |
1347 /* Compare glyphs. */ | |
1348 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1349 { | |
1350 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1351 return 0; | |
1352 | |
1353 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1354 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1355 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1356 | |
1357 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1358 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1359 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1360 | |
1361 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1362 return 0; | |
1363 } | |
1364 | |
1365 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1366 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1367 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1368 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1369 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1370 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1371 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1372 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1373 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1374 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1375 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1376 || a->x != b->x | |
1377 /* Different height. */ | |
1378 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1379 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1380 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1381 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1382 return 0; | |
1383 } | |
1384 | |
1385 return 1; | |
1386 } | |
1387 | |
1388 | |
314 | 1389 |
25012 | 1390 /*********************************************************************** |
1391 Glyph Pool | |
1392 | |
1393 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1394 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1395 | |
1396 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1397 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1398 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1399 | |
1400 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1401 new_glyph_pool () | |
1402 { | |
1403 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1404 | |
1405 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1406 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1407 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1408 | |
1409 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1410 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1411 | |
1412 return result; | |
1413 } | |
1414 | |
1415 | |
1416 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1417 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1418 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1419 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1420 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1421 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1422 | |
1423 static void | |
1424 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1425 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1426 { | |
1427 if (pool) | |
1428 { | |
1429 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1430 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1431 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1432 | |
1433 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1434 xfree (pool); | |
1435 } | |
1436 } | |
1437 | |
1438 | |
1439 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1440 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1441 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1442 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1443 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1444 | |
1445 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1446 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1447 | |
1448 static int | |
1449 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1450 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1451 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1452 { | |
1453 int needed; | |
1454 int changed_p; | |
1455 | |
1456 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1457 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1458 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1459 | |
1460 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1461 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1462 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1463 { | |
1464 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1465 | |
1466 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1467 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1468 else | |
1469 { | |
1470 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1471 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1472 } | |
1473 | |
1474 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1475 } | |
1476 | |
1477 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1478 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1479 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1480 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1481 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1482 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1483 | |
1484 return changed_p; | |
1485 } | |
1486 | |
1487 | |
1488 | |
1489 /*********************************************************************** | |
1490 Debug Code | |
1491 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1492 | |
1493 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1494 | |
1495 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a | |
1496 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1497 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1498 MATRIX. */ | |
1499 | |
1500 void | |
1501 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1502 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1503 { | |
1504 int i, j; | |
1505 | |
1506 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1507 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1508 xassert (i == j | |
1509 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1510 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1511 } | |
1512 | |
1513 | |
1514 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1515 | |
1516 struct glyph_row * | |
1517 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1518 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1519 int row; | |
1520 { | |
1521 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1522 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1523 | |
1524 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1525 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1526 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1527 #if 0 |
25012 | 1528 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1529 #endif | |
1530 | |
1531 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1532 } | |
1533 | |
1534 | |
1535 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1536 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1537 nevertheless. */ | |
1538 | |
1539 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1540 window W. */ | |
1541 | |
1542 static void | |
1543 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1544 struct window *w; |
1545 { | |
25012 | 1546 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1547 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1548 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1549 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1550 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1551 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1552 int c; | |
1553 | |
1554 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1555 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1556 return; | |
1557 | |
1558 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1559 | |
1560 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1561 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1562 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1563 { | |
1564 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1565 | |
1566 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1567 last_text_row = row; | |
1568 | |
1569 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1570 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1571 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1572 | |
1573 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1574 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1575 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1576 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1577 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1578 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1579 | |
1580 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1581 of next row. */ | |
1582 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1583 { | |
1584 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1585 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1586 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1587 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1588 } | |
1589 row = next; | |
1590 } | |
1591 | |
1592 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1593 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1594 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1595 } | |
1596 | |
1597 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1598 | |
1599 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1600 | |
1601 | |
1602 | |
1603 /********************************************************************** | |
1604 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1605 **********************************************************************/ | |
1606 | |
1607 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1608 redisplay | |
1609 | |
1610 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1611 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1612 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1613 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1614 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1615 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1616 performed. | |
1617 | |
1618 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1619 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1620 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1621 | |
1622 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1623 | |
1624 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1625 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1626 | |
1627 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1628 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1629 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1630 | |
1631 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1632 function. | |
1633 | |
1634 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1635 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1636 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1637 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1638 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1639 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1640 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1641 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1642 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1643 | |
1644 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1645 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1646 necessary. | |
1647 | |
1648 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1649 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1650 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1651 windows in the sequence. | |
1652 | |
1653 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1654 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1655 | | | | | | |
1656 | | | | | |
1657 +---------+ | | result height | |
1658 | +---------+ | |
1659 | | | | |
1660 +----------+ --- | |
1661 | |
1662 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1663 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1664 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1665 | |
1666 |<---- result width -->| | |
1667 +---------+ --- | |
1668 | | | | |
1669 | | | | |
1670 +---------+--+ | | |
1671 | | | | |
1672 | | result height | |
1673 | | | |
1674 +------------+---------+ | | |
1675 | | | | |
1676 | | | | |
1677 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1678 | |
1679 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1680 allocated. */ | |
1681 | |
1682 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1683 | |
1684 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1685 size. */ | |
1686 | |
1687 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1688 | |
1689 static struct dim | |
1690 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1691 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1692 Lisp_Object window; | |
1693 int x, y; | |
1694 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1695 int dim_only_p; | |
1696 int *window_change_flags; | |
1697 { | |
1698 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1699 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1700 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1701 struct dim total; | |
1702 struct dim dim; | |
1703 struct window *w; | |
1704 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1705 | |
1706 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1707 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1708 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1709 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1710 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1711 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1712 in_horz_combination_p | |
1713 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1714 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1715 | |
1716 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1717 do | |
1718 { | |
1719 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1720 | |
1721 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1722 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1723 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1724 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1725 dim_only_p, | |
1726 window_change_flags); | |
1727 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1728 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1729 dim_only_p, | |
1730 window_change_flags); | |
1731 else | |
1732 { | |
1733 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1734 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1735 { | |
1736 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1737 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1738 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1739 } | |
1740 | |
1741 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1742 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
1743 dim.width = w->width; | |
1744 dim.height = w->height; | |
1745 | |
1746 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1747 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1748 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1749 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1750 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1751 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1752 w->right_margin_width) | |
1753 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1754 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1755 w->left_margin_width) | |
1756 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1757 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1758 | |
1759 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1760 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1761 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1762 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1763 necessary. */ | |
1764 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1765 { | |
1766 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1767 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1768 } | |
1769 } | |
1770 | |
1771 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1772 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1773 below W. */ | |
1774 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1775 x += dim.width; | |
1776 else | |
1777 y += dim.height; | |
1778 | |
1779 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1780 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1781 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1782 | |
1783 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1784 window = w->next; | |
1785 } | |
1786 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1787 | |
1788 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1789 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1790 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1791 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1792 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1793 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1794 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1795 { | |
1796 total.width = x - x0; | |
1797 total.height = hmax; | |
1798 } | |
1799 else | |
1800 { | |
1801 total.width = wmax; | |
1802 total.height = y - y0; | |
1803 } | |
1804 | |
1805 return total; | |
1806 } | |
1807 | |
1808 | |
1809 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1810 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1811 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1812 | |
1813 static void | |
1814 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1815 struct window *w; | |
1816 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1817 { | |
1818 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1819 | |
1820 while (w) | |
314 | 1821 { |
25012 | 1822 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1823 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1824 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1825 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1826 else | |
314 | 1827 { |
25012 | 1828 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1829 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1830 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1831 struct dim dim; | |
1832 | |
1833 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1834 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1835 { |
25012 | 1836 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1837 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1838 } |
25012 | 1839 |
1840 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1841 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1842 / ch_dim.width) | |
1843 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1844 + 2 | |
1845 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1846 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1847 + 1 + 1); | |
1848 | |
1849 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1850 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1851 / ch_dim.height) | |
1852 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1853 bottom of the window. */ | |
1854 + 2 | |
1855 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1856 + 2); | |
1857 | |
1858 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1859 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1860 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1861 } | |
1862 | |
1863 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1864 } | |
1865 } | |
1866 | |
1867 | |
1868 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1869 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1870 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1871 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1872 | |
1873 void | |
1874 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1875 struct frame *f; | |
1876 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1877 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1878 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1879 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1880 |
25012 | 1881 if (f) |
1882 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1883 else | |
1884 { | |
1885 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1886 | |
1887 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1888 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1889 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1890 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1891 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1892 } |
1893 | |
1894 | |
1895 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1896 | |
1897 To be called from init_display. | |
1898 | |
1899 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1900 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1901 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1902 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1903 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1904 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1905 | |
1906 static void | |
1907 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1908 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1909 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1910 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1911 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1912 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1913 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1914 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1915 |
1916 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1917 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1918 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1919 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1920 |
1921 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1922 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1923 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1924 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1925 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1926 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1927 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1928 } | |
1929 | |
1930 | |
1931 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1932 | |
1933 static void | |
1934 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1935 struct frame *f; | |
1936 { | |
1937 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1938 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1939 else | |
1940 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1941 | |
1942 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1943 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1944 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1945 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1946 | |
1947 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1948 } | |
1949 | |
1950 | |
1951 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1952 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1953 | |
1954 static void | |
1955 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1956 struct frame *f; | |
1957 { | |
1958 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1959 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1960 int pool_changed_p; | |
1961 int window_change_flags; | |
1962 int top_window_y; | |
1963 | |
1964 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
1965 return; | |
1966 | |
1967 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
1968 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
1969 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
1970 | |
1971 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
1972 | |
1973 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
1974 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
1975 { | |
1976 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1977 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1978 } | |
1979 | |
1980 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
1981 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1982 { | |
1983 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1984 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1985 } | |
1986 | |
1987 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
1988 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
1989 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
1990 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
1991 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
1992 matrix. */ | |
1993 window_change_flags = 0; | |
1994 matrix_dim | |
1995 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
1996 0, top_window_y, | |
1997 ch_dim, 1, | |
1998 &window_change_flags); | |
1999 | |
2000 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2001 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2002 | |
2003 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2004 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2005 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2006 | |
2007 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2008 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2009 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2010 { | |
2011 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2012 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2013 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2014 &window_change_flags); | |
2015 | |
2016 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2017 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2018 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2019 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2020 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2021 | |
2022 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2023 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2024 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2025 | |
2026 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2027 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2028 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2029 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2030 } | |
2031 } | |
2032 | |
2033 | |
2034 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2035 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2036 | |
2037 static void | |
2038 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2039 struct frame *f; | |
2040 { | |
2041 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2042 struct window *w; | |
2043 | |
2044 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2045 | |
2046 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2047 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2048 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2049 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2050 #else | |
2051 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2052 #endif | |
2053 | |
2054 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2055 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2056 ch_dim); | |
2057 | |
2058 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2059 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2060 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2061 { | |
2062 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2063 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2064 { | |
2065 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2066 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2067 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2068 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2069 } | |
2070 else | |
2071 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2072 | |
2073 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2074 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2075 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2076 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2077 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2078 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2079 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2080 } | |
2081 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2082 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2083 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2084 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2085 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2086 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2087 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2088 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2089 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2090 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2091 } | |
2092 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2093 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2094 |
2095 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2096 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2097 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2098 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2099 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2100 } | |
2101 | |
2102 | |
2103 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2104 | |
2105 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2106 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2107 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2108 | |
2109 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2110 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2111 | |
2112 static void | |
2113 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2114 struct frame *f; | |
2115 { | |
2116 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2117 | |
2118 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2119 { | |
2120 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2121 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2122 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2123 } | |
2124 else | |
2125 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2126 } | |
2127 | |
2128 | |
2129 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2130 | |
2131 static void | |
2132 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2133 struct frame *f; | |
2134 { | |
2135 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2136 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2137 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2138 } | |
2139 | |
2140 | |
2141 | |
2142 /********************************************************************** | |
2143 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2144 **********************************************************************/ | |
2145 | |
2146 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2147 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2148 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2149 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2150 | |
2151 void | |
2152 free_glyphs (f) | |
2153 struct frame *f; | |
2154 { | |
2155 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2156 { | |
2157 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; | |
2158 | |
2159 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2160 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2161 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2162 | |
2163 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2164 glyph matrices. */ | |
2165 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2166 { | |
2167 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2168 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2169 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2170 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2171 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2172 } | |
2173 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2174 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2175 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2176 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2177 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2178 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2179 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2180 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2181 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2182 } |
2183 | |
2184 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2185 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2186 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2187 { | |
2188 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2189 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2190 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2191 } | |
2192 | |
2193 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2194 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2195 { | |
2196 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2197 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2198 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2199 } |
2200 } | |
2201 } | |
2202 | |
25012 | 2203 |
2204 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2205 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2206 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2207 | |
2208 void | |
2209 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2210 struct window *w; | |
2211 { | |
2212 while (w) | |
2213 { | |
2214 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2215 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2216 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2217 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2218 else | |
2219 { | |
2220 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2221 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2222 W. */ | |
2223 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2224 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2225 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2226 } | |
2227 | |
2228 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2229 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2230 } | |
2231 } | |
2232 | |
2233 | |
2234 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2235 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2236 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2237 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2238 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2239 void |
25012 | 2240 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2241 { |
25012 | 2242 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2243 | |
2244 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2245 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2246 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2247 | |
2248 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2249 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2250 abort (); | |
2251 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2252 abort (); | |
2253 } | |
2254 | |
2255 | |
2256 | |
2257 /********************************************************************** | |
2258 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2259 **********************************************************************/ | |
2260 | |
2261 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2262 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2263 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2264 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2265 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2266 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2267 window matrices in this section. | |
2268 | |
2269 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2270 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2271 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2272 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2273 | |
2274 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2275 | desired | desired | | |
2276 | | | | |
2277 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2278 | current | | |
2279 | | | |
2280 +----------------------------------+ | |
2281 | |
2282 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2283 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2284 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2285 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2286 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2287 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2288 | |
2289 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2290 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2291 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2292 enabled. | |
2293 | |
2294 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2295 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2296 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2297 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2298 | |
2299 This problem is solved like this: | |
2300 | |
2301 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2302 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2303 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2304 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2305 automatically. | |
2306 | |
2307 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2308 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2309 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2310 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2311 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2312 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2313 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2314 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2315 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2316 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2317 | |
2318 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2319 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2320 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2321 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2322 | |
2323 static void | |
2324 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2325 struct frame *f; | |
2326 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2327 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2328 |
25012 | 2329 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2330 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2331 | |
2332 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2333 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2334 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2335 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2336 | |
2337 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2338 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2339 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2340 } | |
2341 | |
2342 | |
2343 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2344 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2345 | |
2346 static void | |
2347 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2348 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2349 struct window *w; | |
2350 { | |
2351 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2352 { |
25012 | 2353 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2354 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2355 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2356 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2357 else | |
2358 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2359 | |
2360 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2361 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2362 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2363 |
25012 | 2364 |
2365 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2366 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2367 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2368 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2369 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2370 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2371 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2372 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2373 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2374 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2375 | |
2376 static void | |
2377 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2378 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2379 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2380 { |
25012 | 2381 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2382 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2383 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2384 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2385 | |
2386 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2387 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2388 { | |
2389 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2390 | |
2391 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2392 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2393 { | |
2394 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2395 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2396 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2397 : '|'); | |
2398 } | |
2399 } | |
2400 else | |
2401 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2402 | |
2403 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2404 frame matrix. */ | |
2405 window_y = 0; | |
2406 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2407 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2408 { |
25012 | 2409 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2410 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
2411 | |
2412 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2413 window row. */ | |
2414 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2415 | |
2416 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2417 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
2418 | |
2419 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2420 { |
25012 | 2421 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
2422 row to frame row. */ | |
2423 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
2424 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2425 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2426 } | |
2427 else | |
2428 { | |
2429 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
2430 | |
2431 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
2432 windows. */ | |
2433 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2434 { | |
2435 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2436 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2437 } | |
2438 | |
2439 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that | |
2440 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2441 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2442 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2443 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2444 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2445 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2446 { |
25012 | 2447 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2448 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2449 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2450 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2451 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2452 | |
2453 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2454 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2455 | |
2456 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2457 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2458 } |
25012 | 2459 |
2460 /* Now, we are sure that window row window_y is a slice of | |
2461 the frame row frame_y. But, lets check that assumption. */ | |
2462 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); | |
2463 | |
2464 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because | |
2465 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2466 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2467 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2468 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2469 #endif |
25012 | 2470 } |
2471 | |
2472 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2473 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2474 can be done simply. */ | |
2475 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2476 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2477 | |
2478 /* Or in flags. */ | |
2479 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
2480 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
2481 | |
2482 /* Next row. */ | |
2483 ++window_y; | |
2484 ++frame_y; | |
2485 } | |
2486 } | |
2487 | |
2488 | |
2489 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2490 | |
2491 Each row has the form: | |
2492 | |
2493 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2494 | left | text | right | | |
2495 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2496 | |
2497 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2498 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2499 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2500 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2501 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2502 | |
2503 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2504 | |
2505 static void | |
2506 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2507 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2508 { | |
2509 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2510 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2511 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2512 } | |
2513 | |
2514 | |
2515 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2516 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2517 | |
2518 static void | |
2519 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2520 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2521 int area; | |
2522 { | |
2523 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2524 { | |
2525 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2526 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2527 | |
2528 while (text < end) | |
2529 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2530 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2531 } | |
2532 } | |
2533 | |
2534 | |
2535 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2536 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2537 | |
2538 static void | |
2539 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2540 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2541 int upto; | |
2542 { | |
2543 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2544 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2545 | |
2546 while (i < upto) | |
2547 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2548 | |
2549 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2550 } | |
2551 | |
2552 | |
2553 | |
2554 /********************************************************************** | |
2555 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2556 **********************************************************************/ | |
2557 | |
2558 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2559 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2560 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2561 | |
2562 static INLINE void | |
2563 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2564 struct frame *f; | |
2565 { | |
2566 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2567 } | |
2568 | |
2569 | |
2570 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2571 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2572 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2573 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2574 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2575 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2576 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2577 | |
2578 static INLINE void | |
2579 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2580 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2581 int row; | |
2582 { | |
2583 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2584 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
2585 | |
2586 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2587 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2588 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2589 | |
2590 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2591 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
2592 | |
2593 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2594 for window matrices. */ | |
2595 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2596 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2597 } | |
2598 | |
2599 | |
2600 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2601 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2602 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2603 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2604 | |
2605 static void | |
2606 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2607 struct window *w; | |
2608 int frame_row; | |
2609 { | |
2610 while (w) | |
2611 { | |
2612 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2613 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2614 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2615 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2616 else | |
2617 { | |
2618 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2619 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2620 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2621 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2622 | |
2623 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2624 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2625 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2626 { |
25012 | 2627 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2628 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2629 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2630 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2631 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2632 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2633 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2634 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2635 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2636 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2637 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2638 } |
25012 | 2639 |
2640 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2641 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2642 } |
25012 | 2643 |
2644 | |
2645 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2646 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2647 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2648 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2649 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2650 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2651 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2652 | |
2653 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2654 | |
2655 void | |
2656 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2657 retained_p) | |
2658 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2659 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2660 int *copy_from; | |
2661 char *retained_p; | |
2662 { | |
2663 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2664 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2665 | |
2666 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2667 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2668 | |
2669 int i; | |
2670 | |
2671 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2672 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2673 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2674 | |
2675 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2676 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2677 { | |
2678 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2679 | |
2680 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2681 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2682 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2683 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2684 | |
2685 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2686 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2687 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2688 } | |
2689 | |
2690 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2691 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2692 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2693 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2694 } | |
2695 | |
2696 | |
2697 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after | |
2698 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2699 | |
2700 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2701 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2702 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2703 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2704 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2705 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2706 which is empty. */ | |
2707 | |
2708 static void | |
2709 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2710 struct window *w; | |
2711 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2712 int *copy_from; | |
2713 char *retained_p; | |
2714 { | |
2715 while (w) | |
2716 { | |
2717 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2718 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2719 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2720 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2721 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2722 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2723 else | |
2724 { | |
2725 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2726 matrix m. */ | |
2727 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
2728 | |
2729 int i; | |
2730 | |
2731 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2732 | |
2733 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2734 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2735 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2736 | |
2737 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2738 { | |
2739 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2740 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2741 | |
2742 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2743 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2744 | |
2745 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2746 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2747 | |
2748 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2749 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2750 | |
2751 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2752 int from_inside_window_p | |
2753 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2754 | |
2755 if (from_inside_window_p) | |
2756 { | |
2757 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2758 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ | |
2759 int to_inside_window_p | |
2760 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; | |
2761 #endif | |
2762 | |
2763 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2764 int enabled_before_p; | |
2765 | |
2766 /* If not both lines inside the window, we have a | |
2767 serious problem. */ | |
2768 xassert (to_inside_window_p); | |
2769 | |
2770 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2771 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2772 that. */ | |
2773 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2774 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2775 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2776 | |
2777 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2778 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2779 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2780 } | |
2781 } | |
2782 | |
2783 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2784 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2785 } | |
2786 | |
2787 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2788 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2789 } | |
2790 } | |
2791 | |
2792 | |
2793 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2794 | |
2795 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2796 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2797 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2798 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2799 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2800 |
21514 | 2801 void |
25012 | 2802 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2803 struct window *w; |
2804 { | |
25012 | 2805 while (w) |
2806 { | |
2807 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2808 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2809 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2810 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2811 else | |
2812 { | |
2813 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2814 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2815 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2816 } | |
2817 | |
2818 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2819 } | |
2820 } | |
2821 | |
2822 | |
2823 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2824 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2825 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2826 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2827 | |
2828 static void | |
2829 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2830 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2831 { | |
2832 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2833 int i = 0; | |
2834 | |
2835 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2836 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2837 | |
2838 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2839 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2840 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2841 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2842 { | |
2843 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2844 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2845 abort (); | |
2846 ++i, ++j; | |
2847 } | |
2848 } | |
2849 | |
2850 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2851 | |
2852 | |
2853 | |
2854 /********************************************************************** | |
2855 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
2856 **********************************************************************/ | |
2857 | |
2858 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2859 | |
2860 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
2861 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2862 | |
2863 static int | |
2864 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
2865 struct window *w; | |
2866 int vpos; | |
2867 { | |
2868 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2869 | |
2870 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2871 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
2872 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
2873 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2874 return vpos; | |
2875 } | |
2876 | |
2877 | |
2878 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
2879 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2880 | |
2881 static int | |
2882 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
2883 struct window *w; | |
2884 int hpos; | |
2885 { | |
2886 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2887 | |
2888 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2889 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
2890 return hpos; | |
314 | 2891 } |
25012 | 2892 |
2893 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
2894 | |
2895 | |
314 | 2896 |
25012 | 2897 /********************************************************************** |
2898 Redrawing Frames | |
2899 **********************************************************************/ | |
2900 | |
2901 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
2902 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
2903 (frame) | |
2904 Lisp_Object frame; | |
2905 { | |
2906 struct frame *f; | |
2907 | |
2908 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
2909 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
2910 | |
2911 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
2912 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
2913 called so early here). */ | |
2914 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
2915 return Qnil; | |
2916 | |
2917 update_begin (f); | |
2918 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
2919 set_terminal_modes (); | |
2920 clear_frame (); | |
2921 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
2922 update_end (f); | |
2923 fflush (stdout); | |
2924 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
2925 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
2926 its redisplay done. */ | |
2927 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
2928 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
2929 f->garbaged = 0; | |
2930 return Qnil; | |
2931 } | |
2932 | |
2933 | |
2934 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
2935 function redraw-frame. */ | |
2936 | |
2937 void | |
2938 redraw_frame (f) | |
2939 struct frame *f; | |
2940 { | |
2941 Lisp_Object frame; | |
2942 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
2943 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2944 } | |
2945 | |
2946 | |
2947 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
2948 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
2949 () | |
2950 { | |
2951 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
2952 | |
2953 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2954 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
2955 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2956 | |
2957 return Qnil; | |
2958 } | |
2959 | |
2960 | |
2961 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
2962 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
2963 | |
2964 void | |
2965 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
2966 { | |
2967 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
2968 | |
2969 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2970 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
2971 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
2972 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2973 } | |
2974 | |
2975 | |
2976 | |
2977 /*********************************************************************** | |
2978 Direct Operations | |
2979 ***********************************************************************/ | |
2980 | |
2981 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
2982 | |
2983 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
2984 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
2985 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
2986 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
2987 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
2988 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
2989 | |
2990 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
2991 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
2992 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
2993 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 2994 |
2995 int | |
2996 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
2997 int g; | |
2998 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
2999 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3000 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3001 struct it it, it2; | |
3002 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3003 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3004 int n; | |
3005 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3006 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3007 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3008 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3009 int added_width; | |
3010 struct text_pos pos; | |
3011 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3012 | |
3013 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3014 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3015 | |
3016 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3017 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3018 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3019 || fonts_changed_p | |
3020 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3021 || face_change_count | |
3022 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3023 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3024 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3025 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3026 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3027 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3028 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3029 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3030 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3031 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3032 || (overwrite_p | |
3033 && PT != ZV | |
3034 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3035 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3036 || g == '\t' | |
3037 || g == '\n' | |
3038 || g == '\r' | |
3039 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3040 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3041 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3042 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3043 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3044 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3045 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3046 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3047 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3048 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3049 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3050 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3051 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3052 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3053 return 0; | |
3054 | |
3055 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3056 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3057 position. */ | |
3058 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3059 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
3060 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos); | |
3061 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, | |
3062 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3063 | |
3064 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3065 | |
3066 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3067 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3068 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3069 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3070 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3071 { | |
3072 struct glyph *last; | |
3073 | |
3074 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3075 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3076 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
3077 && last->u.ch.code == ' ')) | |
3078 return 0; | |
3079 } | |
3080 | |
3081 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3082 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3083 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3084 return 0; | |
3085 | |
3086 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3087 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3088 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3089 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3090 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3091 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3092 | |
3093 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3094 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3095 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3096 combination of both. */ | |
3097 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3098 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3099 { | |
3100 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3101 | |
3102 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3103 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3104 return 0; | |
3105 | |
3106 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3107 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3108 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3109 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3110 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3111 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3112 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3113 return 0; | |
3114 | |
3115 delta += 1; | |
3116 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3117 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3118 } | |
3119 | |
3120 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3121 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3122 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3123 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3124 return 0; |
3125 | |
25012 | 3126 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3127 it2 = it; | |
3128 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3129 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3130 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3131 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3132 { | |
3133 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3134 return 0; | |
3135 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3136 } | |
3137 | |
3138 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3139 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3140 | |
3141 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3142 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3143 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3144 | |
3145 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3146 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3147 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3148 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3149 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3150 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3151 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3152 | |
3153 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3154 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3155 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3156 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3157 while (glyph < end) | |
3158 { | |
3159 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3160 ++glyph; | |
3161 } | |
3162 | |
3163 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3164 inserted ones. */ | |
3165 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
3166 if (glyph->charpos > 0) | |
3167 glyph->charpos += delta; | |
3168 | |
3169 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3170 { | |
3171 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3172 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3173 } | |
3174 | |
3175 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
3176 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (w->current_matrix, | |
3177 w->cursor.vpos + 1, | |
3178 w->current_matrix->nrows, | |
3179 delta, delta_bytes); | |
3180 | |
3181 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3182 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3183 | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3184 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3185 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3186 | |
3187 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3188 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3189 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3190 and updated_row. */ | |
3191 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3192 update_begin (f); | |
3193 if (rif) | |
3194 { | |
3195 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3196 | |
3197 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3198 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3199 else | |
3200 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3201 } | |
3202 else | |
3203 { | |
3204 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3205 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3206 else | |
3207 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3208 } | |
3209 | |
3210 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3211 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3212 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3213 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3214 | |
3215 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3216 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3217 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3218 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3219 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3220 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3221 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3222 else | |
3223 { | |
3224 int x, y; | |
3225 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3226 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3227 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3228 : 0)); | |
3229 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3230 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3231 } | |
3232 | |
3233 if (rif) | |
3234 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3235 update_end (f); | |
3236 updated_row = NULL; | |
3237 fflush (stdout); | |
3238 | |
3239 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3240 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3241 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3242 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3243 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3244 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3245 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3246 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3247 |
25012 | 3248 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3249 return 1; |
3250 } | |
3251 | |
25012 | 3252 |
3253 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3254 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3255 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3256 | |
314 | 3257 int |
3258 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3259 int n; | |
3260 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3261 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3262 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3263 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3264 | |
3265 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3266 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3267 return 0; |
25012 | 3268 |
3269 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3270 displaying a message. */ | |
3271 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3272 return 0; | |
3273 | |
3274 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3275 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3276 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3277 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3278 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3279 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3280 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3281 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3282 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3283 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3284 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3285 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3286 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3287 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3288 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3289 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3290 |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3291 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3292 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3293 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3294 |
25012 | 3295 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3296 | |
3297 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
3298 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3299 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3300 |
25012 | 3301 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
3302 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3303 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3304 |
3305 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3306 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3307 | |
3308 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3309 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3310 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3311 else | |
3312 { | |
3313 int x, y; | |
3314 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3315 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3316 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3317 : 0)); | |
3318 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3319 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3320 } | |
3321 | |
314 | 3322 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3323 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3324 return 1; |
3325 } | |
25012 | 3326 |
3327 | |
314 | 3328 |
25012 | 3329 /*********************************************************************** |
3330 Frame Update | |
3331 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3332 | |
3333 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3334 | |
3335 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3336 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3337 scrolling. | |
3338 | |
3339 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3340 |
3341 int | |
25012 | 3342 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3343 struct frame *f; | |
3344 int force_p; | |
3345 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3346 { | |
3347 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3348 int paused_p; | |
3349 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3350 | |
3351 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3352 { | |
3353 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3354 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3355 | |
3356 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3357 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3358 | |
3359 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3360 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3361 update_begin (f); | |
3362 | |
3363 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3364 support. */ | |
3365 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3366 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3367 | |
3368 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3369 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3370 { |
3371 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3372 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3373 |
3374 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3375 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3376 { | |
3377 update_window (w, 1); | |
3378 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3379 | |
3380 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3381 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3382 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3383 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3384 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3385 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
25012 | 3386 |
3387 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3388 reuse vectors. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3389 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3390 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3391 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
25012 | 3392 } |
3393 } | |
3394 | |
3395 | |
3396 /* Update windows. */ | |
3397 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3398 update_end (f); | |
3399 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
3400 | |
3401 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
3402 #if 0 | |
3403 rif->flush_display (f); | |
3404 #endif | |
3405 } | |
3406 else | |
3407 { | |
3408 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3409 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3410 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3411 | |
3412 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
3413 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
3414 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
3415 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
3416 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
3417 | |
3418 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
3419 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
3420 | |
3421 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
3422 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3423 } | |
3424 | |
3425 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3426 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
3427 return paused_p; | |
3428 } | |
3429 | |
3430 | |
3431 | |
3432 /************************************************************************ | |
3433 Window-based updates | |
3434 ************************************************************************/ | |
3435 | |
3436 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3437 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3438 | |
3439 static int | |
3440 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3441 struct window *w; | |
3442 int force_p; | |
3443 { | |
3444 int paused_p = 0; | |
3445 | |
3446 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3447 { | |
3448 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3449 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3450 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3451 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3452 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3453 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3454 | |
3455 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3456 } | |
3457 | |
3458 return paused_p; | |
3459 } | |
3460 | |
3461 | |
3462 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3463 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3464 | |
3465 void | |
3466 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3467 struct window *w; | |
3468 int force_p; | |
3469 { | |
3470 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3471 { | |
3472 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3473 | |
3474 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3475 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3476 | |
3477 /* Update W. */ | |
3478 update_begin (f); | |
3479 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3480 update_end (f); | |
3481 | |
3482 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3483 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3484 } | |
3485 } | |
3486 | |
3487 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3488 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3489 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3490 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3491 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3492 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3493 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3494 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3495 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3496 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3497 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3498 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3499 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3500 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3501 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3502 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3503 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3504 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3505 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3506 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3507 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3508 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3509 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3510 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3511 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3512 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3513 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3514 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3515 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3516 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3517 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3518 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3519 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3520 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3521 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3522 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3523 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3524 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3525 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3526 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3527 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3528 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3529 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3530 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3531 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3532 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3533 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3534 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3535 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3536 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3537 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3538 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3539 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3540 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3541 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3542 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3543 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3544 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3545 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3546 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3547 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3548 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3549 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3550 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3551 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3552 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3553 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3554 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3555 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3556 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3557 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3558 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3559 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3560 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3561 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3562 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3563 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3564 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3565 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3566 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3567 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3568 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3569 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3570 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3571 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3572 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3573 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3574 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3575 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3576 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3577 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3578 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3579 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3580 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3581 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3582 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3583 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3584 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3585 |
25012 | 3586 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3587 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3588 | |
3589 static int | |
3590 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3591 struct window *w; | |
3592 int force_p; | |
3593 { | |
3594 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3595 int paused_p; | |
3596 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3597 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3598 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3599 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3600 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3601 #endif |
25012 | 3602 |
3603 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3604 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3605 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3606 | |
3607 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3608 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3609 force_p = 1; | |
3610 else | |
3611 detect_input_pending (); | |
3612 | |
3613 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3614 the update. */ | |
3615 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3616 { | |
3617 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3618 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3619 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3620 int yb, changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3621 |
3622 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3623 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3624 | |
3625 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3626 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3627 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3628 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3629 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3630 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3631 |
3632 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3633 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3634 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3635 { | |
3636 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3637 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
3638 desired_matrix)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3639 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3640 } |
3641 | |
3642 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3643 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3644 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3645 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3646 ++row; | |
3647 | |
3648 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3649 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3650 { | |
25546 | 3651 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3652 if (rc < 0) |
3653 { | |
3654 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3655 paused_p = 0; | |
3656 goto set_cursor; | |
3657 } | |
3658 else if (rc > 0) | |
3659 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3660 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3661 } |
3662 | |
3663 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3664 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3665 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3666 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3667 { |
25546 | 3668 header_line_row->y = 0; |
25012 | 3669 update_window_line (w, 0); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3670 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3671 } |
3672 | |
3673 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3674 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3675 if (row->enabled_p | |
3676 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3677 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3678 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3679 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3680 { | |
3681 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3682 int i; | |
3683 | |
3684 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3685 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3686 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3687 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3688 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3689 detect_input_pending (); | |
3690 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3692 |
3693 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3694 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3695 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3696 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3697 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3698 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3699 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3700 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3701 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3702 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3703 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3704 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3705 } | |
3706 | |
3707 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3708 paused_p = row < end; | |
3709 | |
3710 set_cursor: | |
3711 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3712 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3713 if (rif->fix_overlapping_area |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3714 && !w->pseudo_window_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3715 && changed_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3716 && !paused_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3717 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3718 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3719 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3720 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3721 |
25012 | 3722 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3723 { | |
3724 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
3725 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3726 | |
3727 #if 0 | |
3728 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
3729 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
3730 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
3731 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
3732 #endif | |
3733 } | |
3734 | |
3735 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3736 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3737 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3738 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3739 |
25012 | 3740 /* End of update of window W. */ |
3741 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3742 |
25012 | 3743 } |
3744 else | |
3745 paused_p = 1; | |
3746 | |
3747 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3748 |
25012 | 3749 return paused_p; |
3750 } | |
3751 | |
3752 | |
3753 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3754 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3755 | |
3756 static void | |
3757 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3758 struct window *w; | |
3759 int area, vpos; | |
3760 { | |
3761 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3762 | |
3763 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3764 will be relative to. */ | |
3765 updated_area = area; | |
3766 | |
3767 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3768 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3769 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3770 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3771 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3772 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3773 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3774 } | |
3775 | |
3776 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3777 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3778 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3779 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3780 static int |
25012 | 3781 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3782 struct window *w; | |
3783 int vpos; | |
314 | 3784 { |
25012 | 3785 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3786 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3787 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3788 |
3789 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3790 will be relative to. */ | |
3791 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3792 | |
3793 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3794 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3795 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3796 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3797 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3798 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3799 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3800 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3801 || current_row->overlapped_p |
25012 | 3802 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3803 { | |
3804 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3805 | |
3806 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3807 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3808 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3809 | |
3810 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3811 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3812 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3813 } |
3814 else | |
3815 { | |
3816 int stop, i, x; | |
3817 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3818 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3819 | |
3820 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3821 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3822 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3823 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3824 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3825 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3826 | |
3827 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3828 i = 0; | |
3829 x = desired_row->x; | |
3830 | |
3831 while (i < stop) | |
3832 { | |
3833 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3834 don't have to be written. */ | |
3835 while (i < stop | |
3836 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3837 { | |
3838 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3839 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3840 } | |
3841 | |
3842 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
3843 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
3844 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
3845 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
3846 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
3847 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
3848 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
3849 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3850 && i > 0 | |
3851 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3852 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3853 { | |
3854 int left, right; | |
3855 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
3856 &left, &right); | |
3857 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
3858 { | |
3859 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
3860 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3861 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3862 } | |
3863 } | |
3864 | |
3865 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
3866 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
3867 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
3868 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
3869 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3870 { | |
3871 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
3872 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
3873 int current_x = x; | |
3874 | |
3875 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
3876 while (i < stop | |
3877 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
3878 && x == current_x) | |
3879 { | |
3880 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3881 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3882 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3883 } | |
3884 | |
3885 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
3886 { | |
3887 i = start_hpos; | |
3888 x = start_x; | |
3889 desired_glyph = start; | |
3890 break; | |
3891 } | |
3892 | |
3893 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
3894 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3895 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3896 } |
3897 } | |
3898 | |
3899 /* Write the rest. */ | |
3900 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3901 { | |
3902 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
3903 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3904 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3905 } |
3906 | |
3907 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
3908 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
3909 { | |
3910 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
3911 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
3912 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
3913 appropriately above. */ | |
3914 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3915 } | |
3916 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
3917 { | |
3918 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
3919 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3920 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
3921 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
3922 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3923 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3924 } |
3925 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
3926 { | |
3927 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
3928 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
3929 int x; | |
3930 | |
3931 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3932 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
3933 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
3934 | |
3935 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
3936 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
3937 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
3938 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
3939 this way. */ | |
3940 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
3941 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3942 { | |
3943 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
3944 x = -1; | |
3945 } | |
3946 else | |
3947 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
3948 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3949 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3950 } |
3951 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3952 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3953 return changed_p; |
25012 | 3954 } |
3955 | |
3956 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3957 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3958 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3959 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3960 static int |
25012 | 3961 update_window_line (w, vpos) |
3962 struct window *w; | |
3963 int vpos; | |
3964 { | |
3965 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
3966 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3967 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3968 |
3969 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
3970 | |
3971 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
3972 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
3973 updated_row = desired_row; | |
3974 | |
3975 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
3976 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
3977 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3978 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3979 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3980 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3981 } |
25012 | 3982 |
3983 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3984 changed_p |= update_text_area (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3985 |
3986 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
3987 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
3988 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3989 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3990 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3991 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3992 } |
25012 | 3993 |
3994 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
3995 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3996 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3997 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
3998 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
3999 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
4000 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
4001 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
4002 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
4003 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
4004 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
4005 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
4006 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
4007 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
4008 | |
4009 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4010 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4011 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4012 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4013 } |
4014 | |
4015 | |
4016 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4017 be called from update_window. */ | |
4018 | |
4019 static void | |
4020 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4021 struct window *w; | |
4022 { | |
4023 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4024 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4025 | |
4026 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4027 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4028 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4029 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4030 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4031 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4032 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4033 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4034 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4035 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4036 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4037 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4038 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4039 { | |
4040 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4041 | |
4042 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4043 { | |
4044 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4045 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4046 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4047 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4048 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4049 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4050 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4051 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4052 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4053 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4054 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4055 ++row) |
25012 | 4056 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4057 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4058 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4059 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4060 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4061 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4062 break; |
25012 | 4063 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4064 |
25012 | 4065 if (last_row) |
4066 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4067 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4068 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4069 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4070 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4071 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4072 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4073 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4074 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4075 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4076 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4077 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4078 |
25012 | 4079 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4080 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4081 } |
4082 } | |
4083 } | |
4084 else | |
4085 { | |
4086 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4087 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4088 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4089 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4090 } | |
4091 | |
4092 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4093 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4094 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4095 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4096 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4097 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4098 } | |
4099 | |
4100 | |
4101 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. | |
25546 | 4102 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4103 |
4104 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4105 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4106 O(N) time. | |
4107 | |
4108 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4109 | |
4110 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4111 | |
4112 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4113 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4114 | |
4115 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4116 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4117 | |
4118 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4119 forward and backward. | |
4120 | |
4121 Value is | |
4122 | |
4123 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4124 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4125 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4126 | |
4127 static int | |
25546 | 4128 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4129 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4130 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4131 { |
4132 struct symbol | |
4133 { | |
4134 /* Number of occurrences of this line in old and new matrix. */ | |
4135 short old_uses, new_uses; | |
4136 | |
4137 /* Vpos of line in new matrix. */ | |
4138 short new_line_number; | |
4139 | |
4140 /* The line itself. */ | |
4141 struct glyph_row *row; | |
4142 | |
4143 /* Hash collision chain. */ | |
4144 struct symbol *next; | |
4145 }; | |
4146 | |
4147 int SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE = 101; | |
4148 struct symbol **table; | |
4149 struct symbol **old_line_syms, **new_line_syms; | |
4150 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; | |
4151 struct symbol *sym; | |
4152 struct run **runs; | |
4153 int nruns; | |
4154 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4155 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4156 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
4157 | |
4158 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
25546 | 4159 i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; |
25012 | 4160 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 |
4161 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
4162 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
4163 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4164 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4165 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4166 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
4167 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i))) | |
4168 { | |
4169 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
4170 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4171 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
4172 ++i; | |
4173 } | |
4174 | |
4175 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4176 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4177 return -1; | |
4178 | |
4179 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4180 | |
4181 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4182 desired matrix. */ | |
4183 i = first_new + 1; | |
4184 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4185 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
4186 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4187 ++i; | |
4188 | |
4189 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4190 return 0; | |
4191 | |
4192 last_new = i; | |
4193 | |
4194 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4195 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4196 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4197 disabled. */ | |
4198 i = first_old + 1; | |
4199 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4200 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4201 ++i; | |
4202 last_old = i; | |
4203 | |
4204 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4205 i = last_new; | |
4206 j = last_old; | |
4207 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4208 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4209 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4210 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4211 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4212 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4213 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
4214 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1))) | |
4215 --i, --j; | |
4216 last_new = i; | |
4217 last_old = j; | |
4218 | |
4219 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4220 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4221 return 0; | |
4222 | |
4223 /* Allocate a hash table in which all rows will be inserted. */ | |
4224 table = (struct symbol **) alloca (SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4225 bzero (table, SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4226 | |
4227 /* For each row in the current matrix, record the symbol belonging | |
4228 to the row in OLD_LINE_SYMS. */ | |
4229 old_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (current_matrix->nrows | |
4230 * sizeof *old_line_syms); | |
4231 new_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows | |
4232 * sizeof *new_line_syms); | |
4233 | |
4234 #define ADDSYM(ROW) \ | |
4235 do \ | |
4236 { \ | |
4237 struct glyph_row *row_ = (ROW); \ | |
4238 int i_ = row_->hash % SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE; \ | |
4239 sym = table[i_]; \ | |
4240 while (sym && !row_equal_p (w, sym->row, row_)) \ | |
4241 sym = sym->next; \ | |
4242 if (sym == NULL) \ | |
4243 { \ | |
4244 sym = (struct symbol *) alloca (sizeof *sym); \ | |
4245 sym->row = row_; \ | |
4246 sym->old_uses = sym->new_uses = 0; \ | |
4247 sym->next = table[i_]; \ | |
4248 table[i_] = sym; \ | |
4249 } \ | |
4250 } \ | |
4251 while (0) | |
4252 | |
4253 /* Add current rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4254 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) | |
4255 { | |
4256 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4257 { | |
4258 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); | |
4259 old_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4260 ++sym->old_uses; | |
4261 } | |
4262 else | |
4263 old_line_syms[i] = NULL; | |
4264 } | |
4265 | |
4266 /* Add desired rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4267 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4268 { | |
4269 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4270 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4271 ++sym->new_uses; | |
4272 new_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4273 sym->new_line_number = i; | |
4274 } | |
4275 | |
4276 #undef ADDSYM | |
4277 | |
4278 /* Record in runs which moves were found, ordered by pixel | |
4279 height of copied areas. */ | |
4280 nruns = 0; | |
4281 runs = (struct run **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows * sizeof *runs); | |
4282 | |
4283 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4284 in both matrices. */ | |
4285 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
4286 if (old_line_syms[i] | |
4287 && old_line_syms[i]->old_uses == 1 | |
4288 && old_line_syms[i]->new_uses == 1) | |
4289 { | |
4290 int j, k; | |
4291 int new_line = old_line_syms[i]->new_line_number; | |
4292 struct run *run = (struct run *) alloca (sizeof *run); | |
4293 | |
4294 /* Record move. */ | |
4295 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4296 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4297 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4298 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4299 run->nrows = 1; | |
4300 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4301 | |
4302 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4303 j = i - 1; | |
4304 k = new_line - 1; | |
4305 while (j > first_old | |
4306 && k > first_new | |
4307 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4308 { | |
4309 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4310 --run->current_vpos; | |
4311 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4312 ++run->nrows; | |
4313 run->height += h; | |
4314 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4315 run->current_y -= h; | |
4316 --j, --k; | |
4317 } | |
4318 | |
4319 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4320 j = i + 1; | |
4321 k = new_line + 1; | |
4322 while (j < last_old | |
4323 && k < last_new | |
4324 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4325 { | |
4326 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4327 ++run->nrows; | |
4328 run->height += h; | |
4329 ++j, ++k; | |
4330 } | |
4331 | |
4332 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4333 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4334 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4335 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4336 case. */ | |
4337 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4338 ; | |
4339 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4340 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4341 runs[j] = run; | |
4342 ++nruns; | |
4343 | |
4344 i += run->nrows; | |
4345 } | |
4346 else | |
4347 ++i; | |
4348 | |
4349 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4350 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4351 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4352 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4353 | |
4354 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4355 | A | | B | | |
4356 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4357 | B | | A | | |
4358 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4359 | |
4360 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4361 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4362 | |
4363 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4364 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4365 { | |
4366 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4367 | |
4368 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4369 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4370 { | |
4371 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4372 | |
4373 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4374 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4375 { | |
4376 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4377 | |
4378 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4379 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4380 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4381 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4382 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4383 p->nrows = 0; | |
4384 } | |
4385 } | |
4386 | |
4387 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4388 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4389 { | |
4390 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4391 int to_overlapped_p; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4392 |
25012 | 4393 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4394 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4395 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
4396 assign_row (to, from); | |
4397 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4398 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4399 } |
4400 } | |
4401 | |
4402 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ | |
4403 return 1; | |
4404 } | |
4405 | |
4406 | |
4407 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p TO ON_P for all windows WINDOW in the | |
4408 window tree rooted at W. */ | |
4409 | |
4410 void | |
4411 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) | |
4412 struct window *w; | |
4413 int on_p; | |
4414 { | |
4415 while (w) | |
4416 { | |
4417 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
4418 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); | |
4419 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
4420 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); | |
4421 else | |
4422 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; | |
4423 | |
4424 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
4425 } | |
4426 } | |
4427 | |
4428 | |
4429 | |
4430 /************************************************************************ | |
4431 Frame-Based Updates | |
4432 ************************************************************************/ | |
4433 | |
4434 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4435 | |
4436 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4437 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4438 should not be tried. | |
4439 | |
4440 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4441 | |
4442 static int | |
4443 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4444 struct frame *f; | |
4445 int force_p; | |
4446 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4447 { | |
4448 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4449 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4450 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4451 int i; | |
314 | 4452 int pause; |
4453 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4454 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4455 |
4456 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4457 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4458 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4459 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4460 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4461 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4462 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4463 |
314 | 4464 detect_input_pending (); |
25012 | 4465 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
314 | 4466 { |
4467 pause = 1; | |
4468 goto do_pause; | |
4469 } | |
4470 | |
764 | 4471 update_begin (f); |
314 | 4472 |
25012 | 4473 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4474 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4475 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4476 |
493 | 4477 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4478 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4479 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4480 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4481 break; |
4482 | |
4483 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4484 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4485 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4486 |
4487 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4488 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4489 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4490 | |
4491 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4492 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4493 { |
25012 | 4494 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4495 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4496 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4497 { |
4498 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4499 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4500 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4501 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4502 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4503 if (outq > 900 | |
4504 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4505 { | |
4506 fflush (stdout); | |
4507 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4508 { | |
554 | 4509 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4510 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4511 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4512 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4513 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4514 #endif | |
4515 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4516 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4517 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4518 } |
4519 } | |
4520 } | |
4521 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4522 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4523 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4524 |
25012 | 4525 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4526 } |
4527 } | |
25012 | 4528 |
764 | 4529 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4530 |
4531 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4532 if (!pause) | |
4533 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4534 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4535 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4536 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4537 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4538 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4539 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4540 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4541 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4542 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4543 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4544 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4545 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4546 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4547 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4548 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4549 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4550 { |
25012 | 4551 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4552 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4553 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4554 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4555 } |
708 | 4556 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4557 { |
25012 | 4558 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4559 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4560 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4561 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4562 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4563 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4564 { |
25012 | 4565 --row; |
4566 col = 0; | |
4567 | |
4568 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4569 { | |
4570 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4571 must be ignored here. */ | |
4572 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4573 row); | |
4574 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4575 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4576 | |
4577 while (last > start | |
4578 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4579 --last; | |
4580 | |
4581 col = last - start; | |
4582 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4583 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4584 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4585 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4586 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4587 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4588 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4589 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4590 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4591 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4592 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4593 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4594 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4595 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4596 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4597 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4598 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4599 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4600 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4601 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4602 } |
314 | 4603 else |
25012 | 4604 { |
4605 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4606 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4607 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
4608 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0) | |
4609 { | |
4610 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4611 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4612 | |
4613 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4614 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4615 | |
4616 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4617 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4618 } | |
4619 } | |
314 | 4620 } |
4621 | |
764 | 4622 update_end (f); |
314 | 4623 |
4624 if (termscript) | |
4625 fflush (termscript); | |
4626 fflush (stdout); | |
4627 | |
4628 do_pause: | |
4629 | |
4630 display_completed = !pause; | |
25012 | 4631 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4632 return pause; |
4633 } | |
4634 | |
25012 | 4635 |
4636 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4637 |
21514 | 4638 int |
764 | 4639 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4640 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4641 { |
4642 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4643 int window_size; | |
4644 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4645 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4646 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4647 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4648 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4649 register int i; |
764 | 4650 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4651 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4652 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4653 | |
4654 if (!current_matrix) | |
4655 abort (); | |
4656 | |
4657 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4658 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4659 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4660 changed_lines = 0; |
4661 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4662 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4663 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4664 { |
4665 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4666 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4667 return 0; |
25012 | 4668 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4669 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4670 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4671 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4672 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4673 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4674 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4675 } |
314 | 4676 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4677 { |
25012 | 4678 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4679 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4680 } |
314 | 4681 |
4682 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4683 { | |
4684 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4685 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4686 } |
4687 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4688 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4689 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4690 } |
4691 | |
4692 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4693 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4694 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4695 return 1; |
4696 | |
764 | 4697 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4698 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4699 | |
4700 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4701 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4702 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4703 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4704 | |
4705 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4706 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4707 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4708 && (window_size >= |
4709 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4710 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4711 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4712 return 0; | |
4713 | |
25012 | 4714 if (window_size < 2) |
4715 return 0; | |
4716 | |
764 | 4717 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4718 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4719 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4720 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4721 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4722 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4723 | |
4724 return 0; | |
4725 } | |
25012 | 4726 |
4727 | |
4728 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4729 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4730 | |
4731 static int | |
4732 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4733 struct glyph *r; | |
4734 int len; | |
314 | 4735 { |
25012 | 4736 int i; |
4737 | |
4738 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4739 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4740 break; | |
4741 | |
4742 return i; | |
314 | 4743 } |
25012 | 4744 |
4745 | |
4746 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4747 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4748 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 4749 |
4750 static int | |
25012 | 4751 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
4752 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 4753 { |
25012 | 4754 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
4755 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
4756 | |
4757 while (p1 < end1 | |
4758 && p2 < end2 | |
4759 && GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p1) == GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p2)) | |
4760 ++p1, ++p2; | |
4761 | |
4762 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 4763 } |
4764 | |
25012 | 4765 |
314 | 4766 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 4767 |
314 | 4768 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4769 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 4770 |
25012 | 4771 |
4772 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
4773 | |
314 | 4774 static void |
25012 | 4775 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
4776 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 4777 int vpos; |
4778 { | |
25012 | 4779 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 4780 int tem; |
4781 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 4782 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4783 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4784 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4785 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
4786 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
4787 | |
4788 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
4789 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 4790 { |
25012 | 4791 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
4792 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
4793 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 4794 } |
4795 else | |
25012 | 4796 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
4797 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4798 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4799 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 4800 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
4801 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 4802 { |
25012 | 4803 obody = 0; |
314 | 4804 olen = 0; |
4805 } | |
4806 else | |
4807 { | |
25012 | 4808 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
4809 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4810 | |
4811 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 4812 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4813 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
314 | 4814 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 4815 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 4816 olen--; |
4817 } | |
4818 else | |
4819 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4820 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4821 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4822 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 4823 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
4824 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4825 } |
4826 } | |
4827 | |
25012 | 4828 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4829 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4830 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
4831 | |
4832 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
4833 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 4834 { |
4835 nlen = 0; | |
4836 goto just_erase; | |
4837 } | |
4838 | |
25012 | 4839 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
4840 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4841 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
4842 | |
4843 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
4844 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
4845 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4846 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4847 if (!must_write_spaces) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4848 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4849 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4850 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4851 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4852 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4853 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4854 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4855 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4856 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4857 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4858 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4859 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4860 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4861 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4862 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4863 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4864 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4865 } |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4866 |
25012 | 4867 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
4868 return; | |
4869 } | |
314 | 4870 |
4871 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
4872 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 4873 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 4874 { |
4875 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 4876 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 4877 nlen--; |
4878 } | |
4879 else | |
4880 { | |
25012 | 4881 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
4882 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
4883 all the way across. */ | |
4884 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
4885 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4886 } |
4887 | |
4888 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
4889 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
4890 { | |
25012 | 4891 int i, j; |
4892 | |
4893 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
4894 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 4895 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
4896 { | |
25012 | 4897 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 4898 { |
25012 | 4899 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
4900 j = i + 1; | |
4901 while (j < nlen | |
4902 && (j >= olen | |
4903 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
4904 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
4905 ++j; | |
4906 | |
4907 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 4908 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 4909 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
4910 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 4911 |
4912 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
4913 } | |
4914 } | |
4915 | |
4916 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
4917 if (olen > nlen) | |
4918 { | |
4919 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
4920 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
4921 } | |
4922 | |
25012 | 4923 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
4924 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 4925 return; |
4926 } | |
4927 | |
25012 | 4928 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
4929 characters in a row. */ | |
4930 | |
314 | 4931 if (!olen) |
4932 { | |
25012 | 4933 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
4934 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
4935 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
4936 nsp = 0; | |
4937 else | |
4938 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
4939 | |
314 | 4940 if (nlen > nsp) |
4941 { | |
4942 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
4943 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
4944 } | |
4945 | |
764 | 4946 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 4947 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 4948 return; |
4949 } | |
4950 | |
4951 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 4952 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
4953 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
4954 | |
4955 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
4956 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
4957 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 4958 |
4959 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
4960 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
4961 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
4962 { | |
4963 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 4964 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
4965 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 4966 } |
4967 | |
4968 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
4969 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 4970 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 4971 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
4972 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
4973 | |
4974 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
4975 op1 = obody + olen; | |
4976 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
4977 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 4978 while (op1 > op2 |
4979 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 4980 { |
4981 op1--; | |
4982 np1--; | |
4983 } | |
4984 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
4985 | |
4986 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
4987 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
4988 Is it worth it? */ | |
4989 | |
4990 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
4991 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 4992 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 4993 endmatch = 0; |
4994 | |
4995 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
4996 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
4997 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
4998 Is it worth it? */ | |
4999 | |
5000 if (nsp != osp | |
5001 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5002 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5003 { |
5004 begmatch = 0; | |
5005 endmatch = 0; | |
5006 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5007 } | |
5008 | |
5009 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5010 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5011 | |
5012 if (osp > nsp) | |
5013 { | |
5014 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5015 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5016 } | |
5017 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5018 { | |
5019 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5020 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5021 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5022 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5023 { | |
5024 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5025 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5026 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5027 } | |
5028 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5029 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5030 } |
5031 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5032 | |
5033 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5034 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5035 { | |
5036 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5037 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5038 { | |
5039 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5040 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5041 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5042 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5043 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5044 olen = 0; |
5045 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5046 } | |
5047 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5048 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5049 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5050 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5051 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5052 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5053 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5054 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5055 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5056 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5057 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5058 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5059 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5060 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5061 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5062 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5063 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5064 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5065 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5066 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5067 olen = nlen; |
5068 } | |
5069 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5070 { | |
5071 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5072 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5073 olen = nlen; | |
5074 } | |
5075 } | |
5076 | |
5077 just_erase: | |
5078 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5079 if (olen > nlen) | |
5080 { | |
5081 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5082 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5083 } | |
5084 | |
764 | 5085 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5086 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5087 } |
25012 | 5088 |
5089 | |
314 | 5090 |
25012 | 5091 /*********************************************************************** |
5092 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5093 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5094 | |
5095 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5096 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5097 boundaries. */ | |
5098 | |
5099 int | |
5100 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5101 struct window *w; | |
5102 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5103 { |
25012 | 5104 struct it it; |
5105 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5106 struct text_pos startp; | |
5107 int left_area_width; | |
5108 | |
5109 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5110 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5111 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5112 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5113 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5114 | |
5115 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5116 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5117 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5118 | |
5119 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5120 *y = it.current_y; | |
5121 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5122 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5123 } | |
5124 | |
5125 | |
5126 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5127 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5128 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5129 the string returned. */ | |
5130 | |
5131 Lisp_Object | |
5132 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5133 struct window *w; | |
5134 int x, y; | |
5135 int *charpos; | |
5136 { | |
5137 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5138 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5139 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5140 int x0; | |
5141 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5142 | |
5143 /* Only do this for frames under a window system. */ | |
5144 if (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
9650
4295137050dd
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p):
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9572
diff
changeset
|
5145 return Qnil; |
25012 | 5146 |
5147 if (mode_line_p) | |
5148 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5149 else | |
25546 | 5150 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5151 |
5152 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5153 { |
25012 | 5154 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5155 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5156 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5157 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5158 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5159 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5160 |
5161 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5162 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5163 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5164 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5165 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5166 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5167 { | |
5168 string = glyph->object; | |
5169 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5170 break; | |
5171 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5172 } |
25012 | 5173 |
5174 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5175 } |
25012 | 5176 |
5177 | |
5178 /*********************************************************************** | |
5179 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5180 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5181 |
5182 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5183 |
493 | 5184 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5185 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5186 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5187 { |
5188 int width, height; | |
5189 extern int errno; | |
5190 int old_errno = errno; | |
5191 | |
764 | 5192 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5193 |
764 | 5194 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5195 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5196 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5197 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5198 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5199 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5200 | |
5201 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5202 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5203 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5204 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5205 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5206 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5207 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5208 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5209 break; |
5210 } | |
5211 } | |
5212 } | |
5213 | |
5214 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5215 errno = old_errno; | |
5216 } | |
5217 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5218 | |
5219 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5220 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5221 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5222 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5223 |
21514 | 5224 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5225 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5226 int safe; |
314 | 5227 { |
5228 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5229 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5230 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5231 |
314 | 5232 while (delayed_size_change) |
5233 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5234 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5235 |
5236 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5237 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5238 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5239 { |
25012 | 5240 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5241 |
764 | 5242 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5243 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5244 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5245 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5246 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5247 } |
5248 } | |
5249 } | |
5250 | |
5251 | |
764 | 5252 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5253 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5254 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5255 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5256 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5257 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5258 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5259 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5260 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5261 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5262 |
21514 | 5263 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5264 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5265 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5266 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5267 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5268 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5269 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5270 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5271 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5272 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5273 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5274 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5275 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5276 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5277 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5278 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5279 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5280 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5281 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5282 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5283 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5284 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5285 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5286 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5287 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5288 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5289 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5290 |
314 | 5291 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5292 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5293 { |
25012 | 5294 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5295 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5296 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5297 return; | |
5298 } | |
5299 | |
764 | 5300 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5301 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5302 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5303 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5304 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5305 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5306 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5307 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5308 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5309 | |
5310 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5311 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5312 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5313 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5314 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5315 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5316 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5317 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5318 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5319 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5320 return; |
5321 | |
15078 | 5322 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5323 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5324 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5325 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5326 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5327 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5328 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5329 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5330 |
25012 | 5331 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5332 { |
25012 | 5333 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5334 { |
25012 | 5335 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5336 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5337 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5338 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5339 (newheight | |
5340 - 1 | |
5341 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5342 0); | |
5343 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5344 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5345 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5346 } |
5347 else | |
764 | 5348 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5349 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5350 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5351 | |
5352 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5353 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5354 } |
5355 | |
25012 | 5356 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5357 { |
25012 | 5358 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5359 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5360 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5361 | |
5362 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5363 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5364 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5365 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5366 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5367 } |
5368 | |
25012 | 5369 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5370 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5371 | |
5372 { | |
5373 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5374 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5375 | |
5376 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5377 &text_area_height); | |
5378 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5379 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5380 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5381 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5382 } | |
5383 | |
5384 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5385 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5386 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5387 |
5388 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5389 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5390 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5391 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5392 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5393 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5394 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5395 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5396 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5397 } |
25012 | 5398 |
5399 | |
314 | 5400 |
25012 | 5401 /*********************************************************************** |
5402 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5403 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5404 | |
5405 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5406 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5407 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5408 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5409 (file) | |
5410 Lisp_Object file; | |
5411 { | |
5412 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5413 termscript = 0; | |
5414 | |
5415 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5416 { | |
5417 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5418 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5419 if (termscript == 0) | |
5420 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5421 } | |
5422 return Qnil; | |
5423 } | |
5424 | |
5425 | |
314 | 5426 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5427 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5428 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5429 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5430 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5431 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5432 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5433 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5434 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5435 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5436 fflush (stdout); |
5437 if (termscript) | |
5438 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5439 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5440 termscript); |
314 | 5441 fflush (termscript); |
5442 } | |
5443 return Qnil; | |
5444 } | |
5445 | |
25012 | 5446 |
314 | 5447 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5448 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5449 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5450 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5451 (arg) | |
5452 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5453 { | |
493 | 5454 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5455 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5456 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5457 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5458 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5459 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5460 fflush (stdout); |
5461 } | |
5462 else | |
5463 bitch_at_user (); | |
5464 | |
5465 return Qnil; | |
5466 } | |
5467 | |
21514 | 5468 void |
314 | 5469 bitch_at_user () |
5470 { | |
5471 if (noninteractive) | |
5472 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5473 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5474 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5475 else | |
5476 ring_bell (); | |
5477 fflush (stdout); | |
5478 } | |
5479 | |
25012 | 5480 |
5481 | |
5482 /*********************************************************************** | |
5483 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5484 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5485 | |
314 | 5486 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5487 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5488 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5489 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5490 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5491 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5492 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5493 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5494 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5495 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5496 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5497 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5498 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5499 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5500 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5501 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5502 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5503 | |
5504 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
5505 { | |
5506 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5507 sec = (int) duration; | |
5508 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5509 } | |
5510 #else | |
5511 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
5512 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
5513 #endif | |
314 | 5514 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5515 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5516 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5517 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5518 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5519 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5520 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5521 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5522 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5523 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5524 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5525 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5526 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5527 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5528 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5529 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5530 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5531 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5532 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5533 return Qnil; |
5534 | |
650 | 5535 { |
5536 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5537 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5538 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5539 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5540 } | |
587 | 5541 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5542 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5543 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5544 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5545 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5546 immediate_quit = 1; |
5547 QUIT; | |
5548 | |
5549 #ifdef VMS | |
5550 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5551 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5552 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5553 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5554 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5555 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5556 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5557 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5558 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5559 |
314 | 5560 while (1) |
5561 { | |
554 | 5562 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5563 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5564 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5565 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5566 break; |
5567 } | |
5568 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5569 sleep (sec); | |
5570 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5571 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5572 | |
5573 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5574 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5575 | |
5576 return Qnil; | |
5577 } | |
5578 | |
25012 | 5579 |
650 | 5580 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5581 it does the redisplay. | |
5582 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5583 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5584 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5585 |
5586 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5587 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5588 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5589 { |
650 | 5590 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5591 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5592 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5593 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5594 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5595 return Qnil; |
650 | 5596 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5597 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5598 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5599 | |
673 | 5600 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5601 return Qt; | |
5602 | |
314 | 5603 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5604 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5605 #endif |
5606 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5607 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5608 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5609 | |
314 | 5610 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5611 } | |
5612 | |
25012 | 5613 |
650 | 5614 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5615 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5616 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5617 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5618 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5619 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5620 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5621 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5622 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5623 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5624 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5625 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5626 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5627 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5628 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5629 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5630 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5631 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5632 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5633 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5634 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5635 | |
5636 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
5637 { | |
5638 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5639 sec = (int) duration; | |
5640 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5641 } | |
5642 #else | |
5643 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
5644 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
5645 #endif | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5646 |
650 | 5647 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5648 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5649 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5650 #endif |
5651 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5652 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5653 } |
25012 | 5654 |
5655 | |
314 | 5656 |
25012 | 5657 /*********************************************************************** |
5658 Other Lisp Functions | |
5659 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5660 | |
5661 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5662 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5663 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5664 add length checks). */ | |
5665 | |
5666 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5667 | |
5668 | |
5669 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5670 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5671 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5672 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5673 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5674 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5675 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5676 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5677 the current state.\n") | |
5678 () | |
5679 { | |
5680 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5681 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5682 int n; | |
5683 | |
5684 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5685 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5686 { | |
5687 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5688 goto changed; | |
5689 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5690 goto changed; | |
5691 } | |
5692 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5693 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5694 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5695 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5696 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5697 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5698 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5699 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5700 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5701 continue; | |
5702 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5703 goto changed; | |
5704 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5705 goto changed; | |
5706 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5707 goto changed; | |
5708 } | |
5709 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5710 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5711 return Qnil; | |
5712 changed: | |
5713 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5714 n = 1; | |
5715 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5716 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5717 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5718 n += 3; |
5719 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5720 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5721 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5722 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5723 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5724 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5725 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5726 { | |
5727 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5728 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5729 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5730 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5731 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5732 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5733 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5734 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5735 continue; | |
5736 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5737 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5738 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5739 } | |
5740 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5741 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5742 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5743 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5744 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5745 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5746 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5747 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5748 abort (); | |
5749 return Qt; | |
5750 } | |
5751 | |
5752 | |
5753 | |
5754 /*********************************************************************** | |
5755 Initialization | |
5756 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5757 | |
314 | 5758 char *terminal_type; |
5759 | |
25012 | 5760 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
5761 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
5762 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 5763 |
21514 | 5764 void |
314 | 5765 init_display () |
5766 { | |
5767 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
5768 extern int display_arg; | |
5769 #endif | |
5770 | |
25012 | 5771 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
5772 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
5773 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
5774 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
5775 | |
314 | 5776 meta_key = 0; |
5777 inverse_video = 0; | |
5778 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
5779 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
5780 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5781 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5782 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5783 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 5784 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5785 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5786 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5787 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5788 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5789 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5790 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5791 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 5792 |
5793 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5794 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5795 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5796 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5797 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5798 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5799 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5800 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5801 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5802 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5803 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 5804 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5805 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5806 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5807 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5808 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5809 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5810 ) |
314 | 5811 { |
5812 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
5813 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
5814 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
5815 #else | |
5816 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
5817 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5818 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5819 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 5820 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5821 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5822 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5823 #endif |
25012 | 5824 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 5825 return; |
5826 } | |
5827 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
5828 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5829 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5830 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5831 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
5832 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5833 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 5834 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5835 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5836 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5837 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5838 |
314 | 5839 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
5840 if (! isatty (0)) | |
5841 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5842 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 5843 exit (1); |
5844 } | |
5845 | |
5846 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
5847 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
5848 if (!terminal_type) | |
5849 { | |
5850 #ifdef VMS | |
5851 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
5852 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
5853 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
5854 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
5855 #else | |
5856 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
5857 #endif | |
5858 exit (1); | |
5859 } | |
5860 | |
5861 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 5862 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 5863 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
5864 { | |
5865 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
5866 char *p; | |
5867 | |
5868 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
5869 | |
5870 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
5871 if (isupper (*p)) | |
5872 *p = tolower (*p); | |
5873 | |
5874 terminal_type = new; | |
5875 } | |
25012 | 5876 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 5877 |
5878 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 5879 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5880 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5881 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5882 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5883 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5884 |
25012 | 5885 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
5886 | |
5887 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
5888 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
5889 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5890 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5891 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5892 |
25012 | 5893 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5894 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 5895 |
5896 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
5897 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
5898 if (initialized) | |
5899 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
5900 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5901 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 5902 |
5903 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
5904 if (initialized | |
5905 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5906 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5907 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5908 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5909 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5910 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5911 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5912 #endif |
25012 | 5913 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
5914 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); | |
314 | 5915 } |
25012 | 5916 |
5917 | |
314 | 5918 |
25012 | 5919 /*********************************************************************** |
5920 Blinking cursor | |
5921 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5922 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
5923 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5924 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5925 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5926 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5927 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5928 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5929 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5930 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 5931 { |
5932 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
5933 output routines. */ | |
5934 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
5935 { | |
5936 if (NILP (window)) | |
5937 window = selected_window; | |
5938 else | |
5939 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
5940 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5941 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 5942 } |
5943 | |
5944 return Qnil; | |
5945 } | |
5946 | |
5947 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5948 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5949 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5950 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW. |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5951 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5952 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5953 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5954 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5955 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5956 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5957 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5958 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5959 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5960 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5961 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5962 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5963 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5964 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5965 |
25012 | 5966 |
5967 /*********************************************************************** | |
5968 Initialization | |
5969 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5970 | |
21514 | 5971 void |
314 | 5972 syms_of_display () |
5973 { | |
764 | 5974 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 5975 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5976 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 5977 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
5978 defsubr (&Sding); | |
5979 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
5980 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
5981 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
5982 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
5983 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 5984 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
5985 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5986 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5987 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5988 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5989 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5990 |
314 | 5991 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
5992 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 5993 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
5994 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 5995 |
314 | 5996 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 5997 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 5998 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 5999 |
314 | 6000 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6001 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6002 |
314 | 6003 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6004 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6005 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6006 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6007 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6008 |
314 | 6009 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6010 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6011 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6012 |
314 | 6013 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6014 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6015 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6016 |
314 | 6017 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6018 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6019 |
314 | 6020 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6021 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6022 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6023 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6024 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6025 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6026 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6027 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6028 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6029 | |
6030 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6031 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6032 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6033 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6034 | |
25012 | 6035 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6036 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6037 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6038 | |
314 | 6039 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6040 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6041 if (noninteractive) | |
6042 #endif | |
6043 { | |
6044 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6045 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6046 } | |
6047 } |